frame: add skip_tailcall_frames
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item defs
1096 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1097 shared libraries are still allowed.
1098
1099 @item execstack
1100 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
1102 @item global
1103 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
1107 @item initfirst
1108 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113 objects.
1114
1115 @item interpose
1116 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117 but the primary executable.
1118
1119 @item lazy
1120 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123 Lazy binding is the default.
1124
1125 @item loadfltr
1126 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127 runtime.
1128
1129 @item muldefs
1130 Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132 @item nocombreloc
1133 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135 @item nocopyreloc
1136 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1138
1139 @item nodefaultlib
1140 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141 ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143 @item nodelete
1144 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146 @item nodlopen
1147 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149 @item nodump
1150 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
1152 @item noexecstack
1153 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
1155 @item text
1156 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158 @item notext
1159 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161 @item textoff
1162 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
1164 @item norelro
1165 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
1167 @item now
1168 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172 first called.
1173
1174 @item origin
1175 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
1177 @item relro
1178 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
1180 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
1186 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1187 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
1191 @item bndplt
1192 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
1194 @item noextern-protected-data
1195 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1199 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1200 i386 and x86-64.
1201
1202 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1203 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1204 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1205 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1206 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1207 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1208 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1209 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1210 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1211 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1212 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1213 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1214 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1215
1216 @end table
1217
1218 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1219
1220 @kindex -(
1221 @cindex groups of archives
1222 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1223 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1224 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1225 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1226
1227 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1228 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1229 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1230 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1231 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1232 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1233 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1234 resolved.
1235
1236 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1237 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1238 more archives.
1239
1240 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1241 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1242 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1243 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1244 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1245 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1246 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1247 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1248 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1249 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1250 restore the old behaviour.
1251
1252 @kindex --as-needed
1253 @kindex --no-as-needed
1254 @item --as-needed
1255 @itemx --no-as-needed
1256 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1257 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1258 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1259 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1260 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1261 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1262 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1263 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1264 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1265 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1266 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1267 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1268 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1269
1270 @kindex --add-needed
1271 @kindex --no-add-needed
1272 @item --add-needed
1273 @itemx --no-add-needed
1274 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1275 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1276 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1277 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1278
1279 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1280 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1281 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1282
1283 @kindex -Bdynamic
1284 @kindex -dy
1285 @kindex -call_shared
1286 @item -Bdynamic
1287 @itemx -dy
1288 @itemx -call_shared
1289 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1290 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1291 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1292 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1293 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1294 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1295
1296 @kindex -Bgroup
1297 @item -Bgroup
1298 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1299 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1300 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1301 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1302 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1303
1304 @kindex -Bstatic
1305 @kindex -dn
1306 @kindex -non_shared
1307 @kindex -static
1308 @item -Bstatic
1309 @itemx -dn
1310 @itemx -non_shared
1311 @itemx -static
1312 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1313 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1314 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1315 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1316 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1317 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1318 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1319 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1320 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1321 libraries.
1322
1323 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1324 @item -Bsymbolic
1325 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1326 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1327 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1328 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1329 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1330 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1331 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1332 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1333
1334 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1335 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1336 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1337 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1338 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1339 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1340 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1341 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1342 libraries and position independent executables.
1343
1344 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1345 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1346 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1347 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1348 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1349 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1350 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1351 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1352 which support shared libraries.
1353
1354 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1355 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1356
1357 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1358 @item --dynamic-list-data
1359 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1360
1361 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1362 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1363 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1364 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1365
1366 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1367 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1368 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1369
1370 @kindex --check-sections
1371 @kindex --no-check-sections
1372 @item --check-sections
1373 @itemx --no-check-sections
1374 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1375 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1376 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1377 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1378 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1379 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1380 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1381 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1382 option.
1383
1384 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1385 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1386 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1387 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1388 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1389 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1390 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1391 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1392 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1393 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1394 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1395 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1396
1397 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1398 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1399 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1400 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1401 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1402 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1403 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1404 symbols.
1405
1406 @cindex cross reference table
1407 @kindex --cref
1408 @item --cref
1409 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1410 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1411 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1412
1413 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1414 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1415 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1416 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1417 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1418 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1419 symbol are listed.
1420
1421 @cindex common allocation
1422 @kindex --no-define-common
1423 @item --no-define-common
1424 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1425 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1426 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1427
1428 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1429 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1430 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1431 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1432 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1433 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1434 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1435 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1436 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1437 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1438
1439 @cindex symbols, from command line
1440 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1441 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1442 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1443 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1444 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1445 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1446 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1447 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1448 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1449 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1450 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1451 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1452
1453 @cindex demangling, from command line
1454 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1455 @kindex --no-demangle
1456 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1457 @itemx --no-demangle
1458 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1459 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1460 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1461 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1462 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1463 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1464 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1465 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1466 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1467
1468 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1469 @kindex -I@var{file}
1470 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1471 @item -I@var{file}
1472 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1473 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1474 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1475 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1476 doing.
1477
1478 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1479 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1480 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1481 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1482 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1483 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1484
1485 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1486 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1487 @item --fatal-warnings
1488 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1489 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1490 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1491
1492 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1493 @item --force-exe-suffix
1494 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1495
1496 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1497 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1498 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1499 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1500 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1501 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1502
1503 @kindex --gc-sections
1504 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1505 @cindex garbage collection
1506 @item --gc-sections
1507 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1508 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1509 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1510 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1511 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1512 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1513 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1514
1515 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1516 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1517 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1518 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1519 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1520 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1521 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1522 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1523 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1524
1525 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1526 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1527 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1528 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1529
1530 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1531 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1532 @cindex garbage collection
1533 @item --print-gc-sections
1534 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1535 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1536 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1537 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1538 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1539 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1540 line.
1541
1542 @kindex --print-output-format
1543 @cindex output format
1544 @item --print-output-format
1545 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1546 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1547 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1548
1549 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1550 @cindex memory usage
1551 @item --print-memory-usage
1552 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1553 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1554 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1555 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1556 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1557
1558 @smallexample
1559 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1560 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1561 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1562 @end smallexample
1563
1564 @cindex help
1565 @cindex usage
1566 @kindex --help
1567 @item --help
1568 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1569
1570 @kindex --target-help
1571 @item --target-help
1572 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1573
1574 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1575 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1576 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1577 @option{-M} option, above.
1578
1579 @cindex memory usage
1580 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1581 @item --no-keep-memory
1582 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1583 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1584 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1585 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1586 while linking a large executable.
1587
1588 @kindex --no-undefined
1589 @kindex -z defs
1590 @item --no-undefined
1591 @itemx -z defs
1592 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1593 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1594 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1595 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1596 libraries being linked in.
1597
1598 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1599 @kindex -z muldefs
1600 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1601 @itemx -z muldefs
1602 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1603 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1604 first definition will be used.
1605
1606 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1607 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1608 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1609 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1610 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1611 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1612 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1613 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1614 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1615
1616 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1617 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1618 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1619 a shared library.
1620
1621 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1622 libraries specified at link time are that:
1623
1624 @itemize @bullet
1625 @item
1626 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1627 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1628 resolvable at load time.
1629 @item
1630 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1631 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1632
1633 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1634 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1635 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1636 appropriate memset function.
1637 @end itemize
1638
1639 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1640 @item --no-undefined-version
1641 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1642 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1643 will be issued instead.
1644
1645 @kindex --default-symver
1646 @item --default-symver
1647 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1648 exported symbols.
1649
1650 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1651 @item --default-imported-symver
1652 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1653 imported symbols.
1654
1655 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1656 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1657 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1658 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1659 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1660 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1661 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1662 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1663 inappropriate.
1664
1665 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1666 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1667 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1668 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1669
1670 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1671 @item --no-whole-archive
1672 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1673 archive files.
1674
1675 @cindex output file after errors
1676 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1677 @item --noinhibit-exec
1678 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1679 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1680 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1681 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1682
1683 @kindex -nostdlib
1684 @item -nostdlib
1685 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1686 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1687 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1688
1689 @ifclear SingleFormat
1690 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1691 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1692 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1693 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1694 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1695 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1696 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1697 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1698 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1699 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1700 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1701 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1702 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1703 @end ifclear
1704
1705 @kindex -pie
1706 @kindex --pic-executable
1707 @item -pie
1708 @itemx --pic-executable
1709 @cindex position independent executables
1710 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1711 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1712 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1713 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1714 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1715 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1716
1717 @kindex -qmagic
1718 @item -qmagic
1719 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1720
1721 @kindex -Qy
1722 @item -Qy
1723 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1724
1725 @kindex --relax
1726 @cindex synthesizing linker
1727 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1728 @cindex --no-relax
1729 @item --relax
1730 @itemx --no-relax
1731 An option with machine dependent effects.
1732 @ifset GENERIC
1733 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1734 @end ifset
1735 @ifset H8300
1736 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1737 @end ifset
1738 @ifset I960
1739 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1740 @end ifset
1741 @ifset XTENSA
1742 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1743 @end ifset
1744 @ifset M68HC11
1745 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1746 @end ifset
1747 @ifset NIOSII
1748 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1749 @end ifset
1750 @ifset POWERPC
1751 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1752 @end ifset
1753
1754 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1755 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1756 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1757 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1758 instructions, and combining constant values.
1759
1760 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1761 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1762 @ifset GENERIC
1763 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1764 family of processors.
1765 @end ifset
1766
1767 @ifset GENERIC
1768 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1769 but ignored.
1770 @end ifset
1771
1772 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1773 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1774
1775 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1776 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1777 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1778 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1779 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1780 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1781 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1782 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1783 @ifset GENERIC
1784 (such as VxWorks)
1785 @end ifset
1786 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1787 run-time memory.
1788
1789 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1790 or symbols needed for relocations.
1791
1792 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1793 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1794
1795 @ifset GENERIC
1796 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1797 @cindex runtime library search path
1798 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1799 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1800 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1801 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1802 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1803 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1804 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1805 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1806 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1807 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1808
1809 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1810 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1811 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1812 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1813 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1814 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1815 file systems.
1816
1817 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1818 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1819 the @option{-rpath} option.
1820 @end ifset
1821
1822 @ifset GENERIC
1823 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1824 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1825 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1826 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1827 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1828 of the input files.
1829
1830 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1831 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1832 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1833 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1834 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1835 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1836 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1837 appearing multiple times.
1838
1839 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1840 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1841 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1842 runtime linker would do.
1843
1844 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1845 libraries:
1846 @enumerate
1847 @item
1848 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1849 @item
1850 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1851 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1852 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1853 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1854 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1855 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1856 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1857 @item
1858 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1859 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1860 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1861 @item
1862 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1863 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1864 @item
1865 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1866 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1867 @item
1868 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1869 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1870 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1871 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1872 @item
1873 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1874 @item
1875 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1876 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1877 @end enumerate
1878
1879 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1880 warning and continue with the link.
1881 @end ifset
1882
1883 @kindex -shared
1884 @kindex -Bshareable
1885 @item -shared
1886 @itemx -Bshareable
1887 @cindex shared libraries
1888 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1889 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1890 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1891 undefined symbols in the link.
1892
1893 @kindex --sort-common
1894 @item --sort-common
1895 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1896 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1897 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1898 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1899 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1900 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1901 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1902 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1903
1904 @kindex --sort-section=name
1905 @item --sort-section=name
1906 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1907 patterns in the linker script.
1908
1909 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1910 @item --sort-section=alignment
1911 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1912 patterns in the linker script.
1913
1914 @kindex --split-by-file
1915 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1916 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1917 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1918 size of 1 if not given.
1919
1920 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1921 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1922 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1923 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1924 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1925 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1926 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1927 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1928 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1929 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1930 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1931 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1932
1933 @kindex --stats
1934 @item --stats
1935 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1936 as execution time and memory usage.
1937
1938 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1939 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1940 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1941 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1942 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1943
1944 @kindex --traditional-format
1945 @cindex traditional format
1946 @item --traditional-format
1947 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1948 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1949 use the traditional format instead.
1950
1951 @cindex dbx
1952 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1953 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1954 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1955 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1956 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1957 combine duplicate entries.
1958
1959 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1960 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1961 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1962 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1963 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1964 line.
1965 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1966 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1967 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1968 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1969 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1970
1971 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1972 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1973 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1974 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1975 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1976 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1977 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1978 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1979 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1980
1981 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1982 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1983 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1984 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1985 byte of the text segment.
1986
1987 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1988 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1989 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1990 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1991 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1992 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1993
1994 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1995 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1996 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1997 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1998 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1999
2000 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2001 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2002 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2003 values for @samp{method}:
2004
2005 @table @samp
2006 @item ignore-all
2007 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2008
2009 @item report-all
2010 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2011
2012 @item ignore-in-object-files
2013 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2014 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2015
2016 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2017 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2018 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2019 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2020 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2021 command line.
2022 @end table
2023
2024 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2025 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2026
2027 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2028 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2029 can change this to a warning.
2030
2031 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2032 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2033 @item --dll-verbose
2034 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2035 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2036 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2037 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2038 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2039
2040 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2041 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2042 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2043 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2044 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2045 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2046 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2047 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2048 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2049 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2050 @xref{WIN32}.
2051
2052 @kindex --warn-common
2053 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2054 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2055 @item --warn-common
2056 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2057 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2058 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2059 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2060 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2061 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2062
2063 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2064
2065 @table @samp
2066 @item int i = 1;
2067 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2068 file.
2069
2070 @item extern int i;
2071 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2072 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2073 variable somewhere.
2074
2075 @item int i;
2076 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2077 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2078 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2079 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2080 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2081 a definition of the same variable.
2082 @end table
2083
2084 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2085 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2086 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2087 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2088 a common symbol.
2089
2090 @enumerate
2091 @item
2092 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2093 definition for the symbol.
2094 @smallexample
2095 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2096 overridden by definition
2097 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2098 @end smallexample
2099
2100 @item
2101 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2102 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2103 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2104 @smallexample
2105 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2106 overriding common
2107 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2108 @end smallexample
2109
2110 @item
2111 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2112 @smallexample
2113 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2114 of `@var{symbol}'
2115 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2116 @end smallexample
2117
2118 @item
2119 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2120 @smallexample
2121 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2122 overridden by larger common
2123 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2124 @end smallexample
2125
2126 @item
2127 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2128 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2129 encountered in a different order.
2130 @smallexample
2131 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2132 overriding smaller common
2133 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2134 @end smallexample
2135 @end enumerate
2136
2137 @kindex --warn-constructors
2138 @item --warn-constructors
2139 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2140 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2141 detect the use of global constructors.
2142
2143 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2144 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2145 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2146 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2147 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2148 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2149 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2150 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2151 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2152 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2153 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2154 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2155 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2156
2157 @kindex --warn-once
2158 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2159 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2160 @item --warn-once
2161 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2162 which refers to it.
2163
2164 @kindex --warn-section-align
2165 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2166 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2167 @item --warn-section-align
2168 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2169 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2170 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2171 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2172 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2173
2174 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2175 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2176 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2177
2178 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2179 @item --warn-alternate-em
2180 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2181
2182 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2183 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2184 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2185 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2186 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2187
2188 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2189 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2190 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2191 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2192
2193 @kindex --whole-archive
2194 @cindex including an entire archive
2195 @item --whole-archive
2196 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2197 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2198 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2199 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2200 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2201 library. This option may be used more than once.
2202
2203 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2204 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2205 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2206 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2207 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2208
2209 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2210 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2211 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2212 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2213 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2214 @var{symbol}.
2215
2216 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2217 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2218 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2219 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2220
2221 Here is a trivial example:
2222
2223 @smallexample
2224 void *
2225 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2226 @{
2227 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2228 return __real_malloc (c);
2229 @}
2230 @end smallexample
2231
2232 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2233 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2234 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2235 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2236
2237 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2238 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2239 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2240 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2241 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2242
2243 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2244 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2245 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2246 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2247
2248 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2249 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2250 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2251 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2252 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2253
2254 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2255 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2256 @item --enable-new-dtags
2257 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2258 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2259 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2260 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2261 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2262 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2263 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2264 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2265
2266 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2267 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2268 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2269 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2270 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2271 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2272 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2273
2274 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2275 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2276 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2277 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2278 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2279 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2280 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2281
2282 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2283 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2284 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2285 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2286 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2287 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2288 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2289 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2290 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2291 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2292 compress DWARF debug sections.
2293 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2294 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2295 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2296 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2297 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2298 The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2299 the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2300 determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2301
2302 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2303 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2304 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2305 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2306 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2307 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2308
2309 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2310 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2311 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2312 has been used.
2313
2314 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2315 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2316
2317 @kindex --build-id
2318 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2319 @item --build-id
2320 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2321 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2322 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2323 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2324 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2325 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2326 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2327 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2328 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2329 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2330 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2331
2332 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2333 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2334 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2335 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2336 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2337 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2338
2339 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2340 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2341 @end table
2342
2343 @c man end
2344
2345 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2346
2347 @c man begin OPTIONS
2348
2349 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2350 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2351 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2352 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2353 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2354 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2355 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2356 object file).
2357
2358 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2359 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2360 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2361 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2362
2363 @table @gcctabopt
2364
2365 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2366 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2367 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2368 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2369 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2370
2371 @kindex --base-file
2372 @item --base-file @var{file}
2373 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2374 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2375 @file{dlltool}.
2376 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2377
2378 @kindex --dll
2379 @item --dll
2380 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2381 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2382 file.
2383 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2384
2385 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2386 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2387 @item --enable-long-section-names
2388 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2389 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2390 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2391 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2392 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2393 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2394 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2395 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2396 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2397 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2398 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2399 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2400 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2401 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2402 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2403 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2404 image and not stripping symbols.
2405 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2406
2407 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2408 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2409 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2410 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2411 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2412 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2413 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2414 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2415 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2416 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2417 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2418 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2419 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2420 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2421 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2422 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2423 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2424 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2425
2426 @kindex --leading-underscore
2427 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2428 @item --leading-underscore
2429 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2430 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2431 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2432 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2433
2434 @cindex DLLs, creating
2435 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2436 @item --export-all-symbols
2437 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2438 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2439 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2440 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2441 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2442 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2443 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2444 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2445 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2446 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2447 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2448 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2449 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2450 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2451 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2452 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2453 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2454 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2455 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2456 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2457 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2458 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2459 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2460
2461 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2462 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2463 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2464 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2465 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2466
2467 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2468 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2469 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2470 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2471
2472 @kindex --file-alignment
2473 @item --file-alignment
2474 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2475 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2476 512.
2477 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2478
2479 @cindex heap size
2480 @kindex --heap
2481 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2482 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2483 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2484 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2485 committed.
2486 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2487
2488 @cindex image base
2489 @kindex --image-base
2490 @item --image-base @var{value}
2491 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2492 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2493 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2494 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2495 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2496 for dlls.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @kindex --kill-at
2500 @item --kill-at
2501 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2502 symbols before they are exported.
2503 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2504
2505 @kindex --large-address-aware
2506 @item --large-address-aware
2507 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2508 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2509 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2510 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2511 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2512 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2513
2514 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2515 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2516 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2517 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2518 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2519 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2520 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2521
2522 @kindex --major-image-version
2523 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2524 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2525 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2526
2527 @kindex --major-os-version
2528 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2529 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2530 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2531
2532 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2533 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2534 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2535 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2536
2537 @kindex --minor-image-version
2538 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2539 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2540 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2541
2542 @kindex --minor-os-version
2543 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2544 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2545 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2546
2547 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2548 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2549 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2550 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2551
2552 @cindex DEF files, creating
2553 @cindex DLLs, creating
2554 @kindex --output-def
2555 @item --output-def @var{file}
2556 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2557 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2558 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2559 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2560 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2561 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2562
2563 @cindex DLLs, creating
2564 @kindex --out-implib
2565 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2566 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2567 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2568 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2569 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2570 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2571 creation step.
2572 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2573
2574 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2575 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2576 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2577 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2578 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2579 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2580 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2581 execution are avoided.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2585 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2586 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2587 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2588 default.
2589 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2590
2591 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2592 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2593 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2594 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2595 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2596 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2597 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2598 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2599 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2600 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2601
2602 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2603 @item --enable-auto-import
2604 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2605 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2606 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2607 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2608 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2609 specification published by Microsoft.
2610
2611 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2612 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2613 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2614 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2615 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2616
2617 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2618 see this message:
2619
2620 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2621 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2622
2623 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2624 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2625 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2626 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2627 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2628 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2629 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2630 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2631 the warning, and exit.
2632
2633 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2634 data type of the exported variable:
2635
2636 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2637 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2638 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2639
2640 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2641 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2642 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2643 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2644
2645 @example
2646 extern type extern_array[];
2647 extern_array[1] -->
2648 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2649 @end example
2650
2651 or
2652
2653 @example
2654 extern type extern_array[];
2655 extern_array[1] -->
2656 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2657 @end example
2658
2659 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2660 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2661
2662 @example
2663 extern struct s extern_struct;
2664 extern_struct.field -->
2665 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2666 @end example
2667
2668 or
2669
2670 @example
2671 extern long long extern_ll;
2672 extern_ll -->
2673 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2674 @end example
2675
2676 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2677 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2678 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2679 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2680 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2681 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2682 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2683 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2684
2685 Original:
2686 @example
2687 --foo.h
2688 extern int arr[];
2689 --foo.c
2690 #include "foo.h"
2691 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2692 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2693 @}
2694 @end example
2695
2696 Solution 1:
2697 @example
2698 --foo.h
2699 extern int arr[];
2700 --foo.c
2701 #include "foo.h"
2702 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2703 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2704 volatile int *parr = arr;
2705 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2706 @}
2707 @end example
2708
2709 Solution 2:
2710 @example
2711 --foo.h
2712 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2713 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2714 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2715 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2716 #else
2717 #define FOO_IMPORT
2718 #endif
2719 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2720 --foo.c
2721 #include "foo.h"
2722 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2723 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2724 @}
2725 @end example
2726
2727 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2728 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2729 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2730 functions).
2731 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2732
2733 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2734 @item --disable-auto-import
2735 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2736 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2737 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2738
2739 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2740 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2741 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2742 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2743 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2744 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2745 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2746
2747 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2748 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2749 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2750 DLLs.
2751 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2752
2753 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2754 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2755 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2756 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2757
2758 @kindex --section-alignment
2759 @item --section-alignment
2760 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2761 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2762 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2763
2764 @cindex stack size
2765 @kindex --stack
2766 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2767 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2768 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2769 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2770 committed.
2771 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2772
2773 @kindex --subsystem
2774 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2775 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2776 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2777 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2778 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2779 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2780 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2781 @var{which}.
2782 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2783
2784 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2785 of the PE file header:
2786 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2787
2788 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2789 @item --high-entropy-va
2790 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2791 (ASLR).
2792
2793 @kindex --dynamicbase
2794 @item --dynamicbase
2795 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2796 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2797 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2798
2799 @kindex --forceinteg
2800 @item --forceinteg
2801 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2802
2803 @kindex --nxcompat
2804 @item --nxcompat
2805 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2806 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2807
2808 @kindex --no-isolation
2809 @item --no-isolation
2810 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2811
2812 @kindex --no-seh
2813 @item --no-seh
2814 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2815 this image.
2816
2817 @kindex --no-bind
2818 @item --no-bind
2819 Do not bind this image.
2820
2821 @kindex --wdmdriver
2822 @item --wdmdriver
2823 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2824
2825 @kindex --tsaware
2826 @item --tsaware
2827 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2828
2829 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2830 @item --insert-timestamp
2831 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2832 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2833 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2834 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2835 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2836 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2837 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2838 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2839 identically.
2840 @end table
2841
2842 @c man end
2843
2844 @ifset C6X
2845 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2846
2847 @c man begin OPTIONS
2848
2849 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2850 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2851 all executables use an index of 0.
2852
2853 @table @gcctabopt
2854
2855 @kindex --dsbt-size
2856 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2857 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2858 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2859 entries.
2860
2861 @kindex --dsbt-index
2862 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2863 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2864 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2865 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2866 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2867
2868 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2869 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2870 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2871
2872 @end table
2873
2874 @c man end
2875 @end ifset
2876
2877 @ifset M68HC11
2878 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2879
2880 @c man begin OPTIONS
2881
2882 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2883 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2884
2885 @table @gcctabopt
2886
2887 @kindex --no-trampoline
2888 @item --no-trampoline
2889 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2890 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2891 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2892
2893 @kindex --bank-window
2894 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2895 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2896 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2897 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2898 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2899
2900 @end table
2901
2902 @c man end
2903 @end ifset
2904
2905 @ifset M68K
2906 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2907
2908 @c man begin OPTIONS
2909
2910 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2911 when linking for 68K targets.
2912
2913 @table @gcctabopt
2914
2915 @kindex --got
2916 @item --got=@var{type}
2917 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2918 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2919 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2920 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2921
2922 @end table
2923
2924 @c man end
2925 @end ifset
2926
2927 @ifset MIPS
2928 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2929
2930 @c man begin OPTIONS
2931
2932 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2933 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2934
2935 @table @gcctabopt
2936
2937 @kindex --insn32
2938 @item --insn32
2939 @kindex --no-insn32
2940 @itemx --no-insn32
2941 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2942 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2943 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2944 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2945 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2946 possible.
2947
2948 @end table
2949
2950 @c man end
2951 @end ifset
2952
2953 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2954 @node Environment
2955 @section Environment Variables
2956
2957 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2958
2959 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2960 @ifclear SingleFormat
2961 @code{GNUTARGET},
2962 @end ifclear
2963 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2964
2965 @ifclear SingleFormat
2966 @kindex GNUTARGET
2967 @cindex default input format
2968 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2969 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2970 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2971 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2972 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2973 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2974 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2975 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2976 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2977 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2978 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2979 @end ifclear
2980
2981 @kindex LDEMULATION
2982 @cindex default emulation
2983 @cindex emulation, default
2984 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2985 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2986 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2987 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2988 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2989 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2990 linker was configured.
2991
2992 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2993 @cindex demangling, default
2994 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2995 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2996 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2997 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2998 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2999 options.
3000
3001 @c man end
3002 @end ifset
3003
3004 @node Scripts
3005 @chapter Linker Scripts
3006
3007 @cindex scripts
3008 @cindex linker scripts
3009 @cindex command files
3010 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3011 written in the linker command language.
3012
3013 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3014 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3015 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3016 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3017 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3018 described below.
3019
3020 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3021 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3022 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3023 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3024 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3025
3026 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3027 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3028 default linker script.
3029
3030 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3031 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3032 Linker Scripts}.
3033
3034 @menu
3035 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3036 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3037 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3038 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3039 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3040 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3041 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3042 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3043 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3044 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3045 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3046 @end menu
3047
3048 @node Basic Script Concepts
3049 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3050 @cindex linker script concepts
3051 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3052 describe the linker script language.
3053
3054 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3055 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3056 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3057 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3058 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3059 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3060 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3061 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3062
3063 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3064 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3065 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3066 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3067 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3068 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3069 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3070 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3071 of debugging information.
3072
3073 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3074 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3075 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3076 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3077 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3078 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3079 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3080 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3081 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3082 RAM address would be the VMA.
3083
3084 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3085 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3086
3087 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3088 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3089 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3090 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3091 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3092 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3093 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3094
3095 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3096 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3097 option.
3098
3099 @node Script Format
3100 @section Linker Script Format
3101 @cindex linker script format
3102 Linker scripts are text files.
3103
3104 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3105 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3106 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3107 generally ignored.
3108
3109 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3110 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3111 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3112 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3113 file name.
3114
3115 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3116 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3117 to whitespace.
3118
3119 @node Simple Example
3120 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3121 @cindex linker script example
3122 @cindex example of linker script
3123 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3124
3125 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3126 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3127 memory layout of the output file.
3128
3129 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3130 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3131 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3132 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3133 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3134 your input files.
3135
3136 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3137 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3138 linker script which will do that:
3139 @smallexample
3140 SECTIONS
3141 @{
3142 . = 0x10000;
3143 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3144 . = 0x8000000;
3145 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3146 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3147 @}
3148 @end smallexample
3149
3150 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3151 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3152 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3153
3154 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3155 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3156 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3157 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3158 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3159 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3160 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3161
3162 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3163 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3164 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3165 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3166 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3167 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3168
3169 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3170 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3171 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3172
3173 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3174 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3175 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3176 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3177 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3178 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3179 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3180
3181 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3182 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3183 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3184 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3185 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3186 sections.
3187
3188 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3189
3190 @node Simple Commands
3191 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3192 @cindex linker script simple commands
3193 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3194
3195 @menu
3196 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3197 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3198 @ifclear SingleFormat
3199 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3200 @end ifclear
3201
3202 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3203 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3204 @end menu
3205
3206 @node Entry Point
3207 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3208 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3209 @cindex start of execution
3210 @cindex first instruction
3211 @cindex entry point
3212 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3213 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3214 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3215 @smallexample
3216 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3217 @end smallexample
3218
3219 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3220 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3221 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3222 @itemize @bullet
3223 @item
3224 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3225 @item
3226 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3227 @item
3228 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3229 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3230 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3231 @item
3232 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3233 @item
3234 The address @code{0}.
3235 @end itemize
3236
3237 @node File Commands
3238 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3239 @cindex linker script file commands
3240 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3241
3242 @table @code
3243 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3244 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3245 @cindex including a linker script
3246 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3247 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3248 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3249 10 levels deep.
3250
3251 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3252 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3253
3254 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3255 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3256 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3257 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3258 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3259 @cindex linker script input object files
3260 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3261 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3262
3263 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3264 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3265 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3266
3267 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3268 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3269
3270 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3271 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3272 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3273 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3274 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3275 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3276 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3277 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3278 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3279
3280 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3281 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3282 @samp{-l}.
3283
3284 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3285 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3286 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3287
3288 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3289 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3290 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3291 @cindex grouping input files
3292 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3293 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3294 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3295 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3296
3297 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3298 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3299 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3300 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3301 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3302 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3303 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3304 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3305 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3306 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3307 setting afterwards.
3308
3309 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3310 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3311 @cindex output file name in linker script
3312 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3313 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3314 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3315 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3316 precedence.
3317
3318 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3319 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3320
3321 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3322 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3323 @cindex library search path in linker script
3324 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3325 @cindex search path in linker script
3326 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3327 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3328 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3329 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3330 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3331 the command line option are searched first.
3332
3333 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3334 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3335 @cindex first input file
3336 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3337 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3338 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3339 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3340 first file.
3341 @end table
3342
3343 @ifclear SingleFormat
3344 @node Format Commands
3345 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3346 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3347
3348 @table @code
3349 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3350 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3351 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3352 @cindex output file format in linker script
3353 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3354 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3355 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3356 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3357 line option takes precedence.
3358
3359 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3360 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3361 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3362 desired endianness.
3363
3364 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3365 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3366 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3367 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3368
3369 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3370 command:
3371 @smallexample
3372 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3373 @end smallexample
3374 This says that the default format for the output file is
3375 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3376 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3377 format.
3378
3379 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3380 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3381 @cindex input file format in linker script
3382 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3383 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3384 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3385 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3386 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3387 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3388 @end table
3389 @end ifclear
3390
3391 @node REGION_ALIAS
3392 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3393 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3394 @cindex region alias
3395 @cindex region names
3396
3397 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3398 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3399
3400 @smallexample
3401 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3402 @end smallexample
3403
3404 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3405 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3406 to memory regions. An example follows.
3407
3408 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3409 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3410 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3411 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3412 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3413 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3414 sections:
3415
3416 @itemize @bullet
3417 @item
3418 @code{.text} program code;
3419 @item
3420 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3421 @item
3422 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3423 @item
3424 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3425 @end itemize
3426
3427 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3428 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3429 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3430 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3431 @code{C}:
3432 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3433 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3434 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3435 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3436 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3437 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3438 @end multitable
3439 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3440 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3441 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3442 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3443
3444 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3445 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3446 memory layout:
3447 @smallexample
3448 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3449
3450 SECTIONS
3451 @{
3452 .text :
3453 @{
3454 *(.text)
3455 @} > REGION_TEXT
3456 .rodata :
3457 @{
3458 *(.rodata)
3459 rodata_end = .;
3460 @} > REGION_RODATA
3461 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3462 @{
3463 data_start = .;
3464 *(.data)
3465 @} > REGION_DATA
3466 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3467 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3468 .bss :
3469 @{
3470 *(.bss)
3471 @} > REGION_BSS
3472 @}
3473 @end smallexample
3474
3475 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3476 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3477 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3478 @table @code
3479 @item A
3480 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3481 @smallexample
3482 MEMORY
3483 @{
3484 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3485 @}
3486
3487 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3488 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3489 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3490 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3491 @end smallexample
3492 @item B
3493 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3494 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3495 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3496 @smallexample
3497 MEMORY
3498 @{
3499 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3500 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3501 @}
3502
3503 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3504 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3505 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3506 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3507 @end smallexample
3508 @item C
3509 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3510 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3511 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3512 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3513 @smallexample
3514 MEMORY
3515 @{
3516 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3517 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3518 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3519 @}
3520
3521 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3522 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3523 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3524 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3525 @end smallexample
3526 @end table
3527
3528 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3529 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3530 necessary:
3531 @smallexample
3532 #include <string.h>
3533
3534 extern char data_start [];
3535 extern char data_size [];
3536 extern char data_load_start [];
3537
3538 void copy_data(void)
3539 @{
3540 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3541 @{
3542 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3543 @}
3544 @}
3545 @end smallexample
3546
3547 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3548 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3549 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3550
3551 @table @code
3552 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3553 @kindex ASSERT
3554 @cindex assertion in linker script
3555 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3556 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3557
3558 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3559 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3560 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3561 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3562 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3563
3564 @smallexample
3565 .stack :
3566 @{
3567 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3568 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3569 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3570 @}
3571 @end smallexample
3572
3573 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3574 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3575 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3576
3577 @smallexample
3578 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3579 .stack :
3580 @{
3581 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3582 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3583 @}
3584 @end smallexample
3585
3586 will work.
3587
3588 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3589 @kindex EXTERN
3590 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3591 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3592 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3593 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3594 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3595 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3596
3597 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3598 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3599 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3600 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3601 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3602 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3603
3604 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3605 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3606 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3607 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3608 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3609 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3610
3611 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3612 @kindex INSERT
3613 @cindex insert user script into default script
3614 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3615 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3616 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3617 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3618 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3619 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3620 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3621 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3622 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3623 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3624 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3625 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3626 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3627
3628 @smallexample
3629 SECTIONS
3630 @{
3631 OVERLAY :
3632 @{
3633 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3634 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3635 @}
3636 @}
3637 INSERT AFTER .text;
3638 @end smallexample
3639
3640 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3641 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3642 @cindex cross references
3643 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3644 references among certain output sections.
3645
3646 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3647 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3648 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3649 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3650 a function defined in the other section.
3651
3652 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3653 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3654 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3655 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3656 names.
3657
3658 @ifclear SingleFormat
3659 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3660 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3661 @cindex machine architecture
3662 @cindex architecture
3663 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3664 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3665 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3666 the @samp{-f} option.
3667 @end ifclear
3668
3669 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3670 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3671 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3672 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3673 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3674 @xref{Expression Section}.
3675 @end table
3676
3677 @node Assignments
3678 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3679 @cindex assignment in scripts
3680 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3681 @cindex variables, defining
3682 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3683 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3684
3685 @menu
3686 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3687 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3688 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3689 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3690 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3691 @end menu
3692
3693 @node Simple Assignments
3694 @subsection Simple Assignments
3695
3696 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3697
3698 @table @code
3699 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3700 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3701 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3702 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3703 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3704 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3705 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3706 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3707 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3708 @end table
3709
3710 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3711 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3712 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3713
3714 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3715 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3716
3717 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3718
3719 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3720
3721 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3722 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3723 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3724
3725 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3726 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3727
3728 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3729 assignments may be used:
3730
3731 @smallexample
3732 floating_point = 0;
3733 SECTIONS
3734 @{
3735 .text :
3736 @{
3737 *(.text)
3738 _etext = .;
3739 @}
3740 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3741 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3742 @}
3743 @end smallexample
3744 @noindent
3745 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3746 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3747 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3748 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3749 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3750
3751 @node HIDDEN
3752 @subsection HIDDEN
3753 @cindex HIDDEN
3754 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3755 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3756
3757 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3758 @code{HIDDEN}:
3759
3760 @smallexample
3761 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3762 SECTIONS
3763 @{
3764 .text :
3765 @{
3766 *(.text)
3767 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3768 @}
3769 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3770 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3771 @}
3772 @end smallexample
3773 @noindent
3774 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3775
3776 @node PROVIDE
3777 @subsection PROVIDE
3778 @cindex PROVIDE
3779 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3780 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3781 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3782 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3783 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3784 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3785 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3786 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3787
3788 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3789 @smallexample
3790 SECTIONS
3791 @{
3792 .text :
3793 @{
3794 *(.text)
3795 _etext = .;
3796 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3797 @}
3798 @}
3799 @end smallexample
3800
3801 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3802 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3803 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3804 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3805 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3806 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3807
3808 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3809 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3810 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3811 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3812 hidden and won't be exported.
3813
3814 @node Source Code Reference
3815 @subsection Source Code Reference
3816
3817 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3818 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3819 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3820 symbol that does not have a value.
3821
3822 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3823 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3824 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3825 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3826 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3827 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3828 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3829 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3830
3831 @smallexample
3832 extern int foo;
3833 @end smallexample
3834
3835 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 _foo = 1000;
3839 @end smallexample
3840
3841 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3842 transformation has taken place.
3843
3844 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3845 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3846 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3847 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3848 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3849 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3850 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3851
3852 @smallexample
3853 int foo = 1000;
3854 @end smallexample
3855
3856 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3857 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3858 number 1000 is initially stored.
3859
3860 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3861 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3862 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3863 So:
3864
3865 @smallexample
3866 foo = 1;
3867 @end smallexample
3868
3869 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3870 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3871 address. Whereas:
3872
3873 @smallexample
3874 int * a = & foo;
3875 @end smallexample
3876
3877 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3878 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3879 the variable @samp{a}.
3880
3881 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3882 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3883 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3884
3885 @smallexample
3886 foo = 1000;
3887 @end smallexample
3888
3889 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3890 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3891 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3892 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3893 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3894
3895 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3896 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3897 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3898 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3899 linker script contains these declarations:
3900
3901 @smallexample
3902 @group
3903 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3904 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3905 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3906 @end group
3907 @end smallexample
3908
3909 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3910
3911 @smallexample
3912 @group
3913 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3914
3915 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3916 @end group
3917 @end smallexample
3918
3919 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3920 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3921 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3922
3923 @smallexample
3924 @group
3925 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3926
3927 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3928 @end group
3929 @end smallexample
3930
3931 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3932 operators.
3933
3934 @node SECTIONS
3935 @section SECTIONS Command
3936 @kindex SECTIONS
3937 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3938 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3939
3940 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3941 @smallexample
3942 SECTIONS
3943 @{
3944 @var{sections-command}
3945 @var{sections-command}
3946 @dots{}
3947 @}
3948 @end smallexample
3949
3950 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3951
3952 @itemize @bullet
3953 @item
3954 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3955 @item
3956 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3957 @item
3958 an output section description
3959 @item
3960 an overlay description
3961 @end itemize
3962
3963 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3964 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3965 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3966 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3967 the layout of the output file.
3968
3969 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3970 below.
3971
3972 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3973 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3974 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3975 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3976 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3977 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3978
3979 @menu
3980 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3981 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3982 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3983 * Input Section:: Input section description
3984 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3985 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3986 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3987 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3988 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3989 @end menu
3990
3991 @node Output Section Description
3992 @subsection Output Section Description
3993 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3994 @smallexample
3995 @group
3996 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3997 [AT(@var{lma})]
3998 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3999 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4000 [@var{constraint}]
4001 @{
4002 @var{output-section-command}
4003 @var{output-section-command}
4004 @dots{}
4005 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4006 @end group
4007 @end smallexample
4008
4009 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4010
4011 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4012 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4013 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4014 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4015 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4016
4017 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4018
4019 @itemize @bullet
4020 @item
4021 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4022 @item
4023 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4024 @item
4025 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4026 @item
4027 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4028 @end itemize
4029
4030 @node Output Section Name
4031 @subsection Output Section Name
4032 @cindex name, section
4033 @cindex section name
4034 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4035 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4036 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4037 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4038 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4039 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4040 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4041 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4042 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4043 commas must be quoted.
4044
4045 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4046 Discarding}.
4047
4048 @node Output Section Address
4049 @subsection Output Section Address
4050 @cindex address, section
4051 @cindex section address
4052 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4053 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4054 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4055
4056 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4057 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4058 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4059 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4060 contained within the output section.
4061
4062 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4063
4064 @itemize @bullet
4065 @item
4066 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4067 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4068 in that region.
4069
4070 @item
4071 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4072 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4073 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4074 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4075
4076 @item
4077 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4078 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4079 counter.
4080 @end itemize
4081
4082 @noindent
4083 For example:
4084
4085 @smallexample
4086 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4087 @end smallexample
4088
4089 @noindent
4090 and
4091
4092 @smallexample
4093 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4094 @end smallexample
4095
4096 @noindent
4097 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4098 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4099 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4100 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4101 input sections.
4102
4103 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4104 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4105 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4106 do something like this:
4107 @smallexample
4108 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4109 @end smallexample
4110 @noindent
4111 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4112 aligned upward to the specified value.
4113
4114 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4115 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4116 sections are ignored).
4117
4118 @node Input Section
4119 @subsection Input Section Description
4120 @cindex input sections
4121 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4122 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4123
4124 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4125 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4126 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4127 map the input files into your memory layout.
4128
4129 @menu
4130 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4131 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4132 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4133 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4134 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4135 @end menu
4136
4137 @node Input Section Basics
4138 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4139 @cindex input section basics
4140 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4141 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4142
4143 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4144 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4145
4146 The most common input section description is to include all input
4147 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4148 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4149 @smallexample
4150 *(.text)
4151 @end smallexample
4152 @noindent
4153 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4154 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4155 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4156 example:
4157 @smallexample
4158 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4159 @end smallexample
4160 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4161 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4162
4163 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4164 @smallexample
4165 *(.text .rdata)
4166 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4167 @end smallexample
4168 @noindent
4169 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4170 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4171 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4172 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4173 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4174 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4175
4176 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4177 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4178 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4179 @smallexample
4180 data.o(.data)
4181 @end smallexample
4182
4183 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4184 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4185
4186 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4187
4188 @smallexample
4189 @group
4190 SECTIONS @{
4191 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4192 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4193 @}
4194 @end group
4195 @end smallexample
4196
4197 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4198 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4199 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4200 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4201 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4202
4203 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4204 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4205 with no whitespace around the colon.
4206
4207 @table @samp
4208 @item archive:file
4209 matches file within archive
4210 @item archive:
4211 matches the whole archive
4212 @item :file
4213 matches file but not one in an archive
4214 @end table
4215
4216 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4217 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4218 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4219 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4220 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4221 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4222 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4223 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4224 command.
4225
4226 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4227 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4228 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4229 @smallexample
4230 data.o
4231 @end smallexample
4232
4233 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4234 and does not contain any wild card
4235 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4236 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4237 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4238 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4239 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4240 the archive search path.
4241
4242 @node Input Section Wildcards
4243 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4244 @cindex input section wildcards
4245 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4246 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4247 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4248 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4249 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4250
4251 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4252 pattern for the file name.
4253
4254 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4255
4256 @table @samp
4257 @item *
4258 matches any number of characters
4259 @item ?
4260 matches any single character
4261 @item [@var{chars}]
4262 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4263 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4264 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4265 @item \
4266 quotes the following character
4267 @end table
4268
4269 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4270 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4271 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4272 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4273 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4274 a @samp{/} character.
4275
4276 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4277 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4278 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4279
4280 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4281 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4282 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4283 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4284 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4285 @smallexample
4286 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4287 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4288 @end smallexample
4289
4290 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4291 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4292 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4293 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4294 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4295 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4296 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4297
4298 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4299 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4300 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4301 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4302 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4303 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4304
4305 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4306 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4307 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4308 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4309 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4310
4311 @cindex SORT
4312 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4313
4314 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4315 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4316
4317 @enumerate
4318 @item
4319 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4320 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4321 sections have the same name.
4322 @item
4323 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4324 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4325 sections have the same alignment.
4326 @item
4327 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4328 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4329 @item
4330 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4331 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4332 @item
4333 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4334 @end enumerate
4335
4336 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4337 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4338 takes precedence over the command line option.
4339
4340 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4341 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4342 treated as nested sorting command.
4343
4344 @enumerate
4345 @item
4346 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4347 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4348 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4349 @item
4350 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4351 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4352 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4353 @end enumerate
4354
4355 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4356 command line option will be ignored.
4357
4358 @cindex SORT_NONE
4359 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4360 section sorting option.
4361
4362 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4363 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4364 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4365
4366 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4367 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4368 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4369 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4370 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4371 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4372 @smallexample
4373 @group
4374 SECTIONS @{
4375 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4376 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4377 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4378 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4379 @}
4380 @end group
4381 @end smallexample
4382
4383 @node Input Section Common
4384 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4385 @cindex common symbol placement
4386 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4387 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4388 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4389 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4390 named @samp{COMMON}.
4391
4392 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4393 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4394 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4395 input files are placed in another section.
4396
4397 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4398 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4399 @smallexample
4400 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4401 @end smallexample
4402
4403 @cindex scommon section
4404 @cindex small common symbols
4405 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4406 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4407 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4408 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4409 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4410 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4411 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4412 locations.
4413
4414 @cindex [COMMON]
4415 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4416 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4417 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4418
4419 @node Input Section Keep
4420 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4421 @cindex KEEP
4422 @cindex garbage collection
4423 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4424 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4425 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4426 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4427 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4428
4429 @node Input Section Example
4430 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4431 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4432 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4433 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4434 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4435 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4436 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4437 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4438 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4439 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4440
4441 @smallexample
4442 @group
4443 SECTIONS @{
4444 outputa 0x10000 :
4445 @{
4446 all.o
4447 foo.o (.input1)
4448 @}
4449 @end group
4450 @group
4451 outputb :
4452 @{
4453 foo.o (.input2)
4454 foo1.o (.input1)
4455 @}
4456 @end group
4457 @group
4458 outputc :
4459 @{
4460 *(.input1)
4461 *(.input2)
4462 @}
4463 @}
4464 @end group
4465 @end smallexample
4466
4467 @node Output Section Data
4468 @subsection Output Section Data
4469 @cindex data
4470 @cindex section data
4471 @cindex output section data
4472 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4473 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4474 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4475 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4476 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4477 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4478 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4479 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4480 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4481 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4482 counter.
4483
4484 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4485 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4486 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4487 stored.
4488
4489 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4490 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4491 @smallexample
4492 BYTE(1)
4493 LONG(addr)
4494 @end smallexample
4495
4496 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4497 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4498 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4499 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4500 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4501
4502 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4503 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4504 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4505 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4506 endianness of the first input object file.
4507
4508 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4509 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4510 @smallexample
4511 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4512 @end smallexample
4513 whereas this will work:
4514 @smallexample
4515 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4516 @end smallexample
4517
4518 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4519 @cindex holes, filling
4520 @cindex unspecified memory
4521 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4522 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4523 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4524 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4525 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4526 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4527 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4528 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4529 different parts of an output section.
4530
4531 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4532 value @samp{0x90}:
4533 @smallexample
4534 FILL(0x90909090)
4535 @end smallexample
4536
4537 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4538 section attribute, but it only affects the
4539 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4540 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4541 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4542 expression.
4543
4544 @node Output Section Keywords
4545 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4546 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4547 commands.
4548
4549 @table @code
4550 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4551 @cindex input filename symbols
4552 @cindex filename symbols
4553 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4554 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4555 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4556 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4557 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4558
4559 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4560 normally used for any other object file format.
4561
4562 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4563 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4564 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4565 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4566 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4567 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4568 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4569 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4570 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4571 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4572 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4573 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4574 ignored for other object file formats.
4575
4576 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4577 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4578 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4579 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4580 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4581 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4582 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4583 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4584 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4585 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4586 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4587 @code{exit}.
4588
4589 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4590 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4591 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4592 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4593 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4594 runtime code expects to see.
4595
4596 @smallexample
4597 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4598 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4599 *(.ctors)
4600 LONG(0)
4601 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4602 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4603 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4604 *(.dtors)
4605 LONG(0)
4606 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4607 @end smallexample
4608
4609 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4610 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4611 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4612 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4613 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4614 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4615 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4616 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4617
4618 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4619 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4620 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4621 scripts.
4622
4623 @end table
4624
4625 @node Output Section Discarding
4626 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4627 @cindex discarding sections
4628 @cindex sections, discarding
4629 @cindex removing sections
4630 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4631 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4632 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4633 @smallexample
4634 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4635 @end smallexample
4636 @noindent
4637 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4638 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4639 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4640 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4641 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4642 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4643 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4644 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4645 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4646
4647 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4648 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4649 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4650 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4651 section is discarded.
4652
4653 @cindex /DISCARD/
4654 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4655 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4656 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4657
4658 @node Output Section Attributes
4659 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4660 @cindex output section attributes
4661 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4662 like this:
4663
4664 @smallexample
4665 @group
4666 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4667 [AT(@var{lma})]
4668 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4669 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4670 [@var{constraint}]
4671 @{
4672 @var{output-section-command}
4673 @var{output-section-command}
4674 @dots{}
4675 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4676 @end group
4677 @end smallexample
4678
4679 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4680 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4681 remaining section attributes.
4682
4683 @menu
4684 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4685 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4686 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4687 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4688 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4689 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4690 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4691 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4692 @end menu
4693
4694 @node Output Section Type
4695 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4696 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4697 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4698
4699 @table @code
4700 @item NOLOAD
4701 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4702 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4703 @item DSECT
4704 @itemx COPY
4705 @itemx INFO
4706 @itemx OVERLAY
4707 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4708 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4709 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4710 section when the program is run.
4711 @end table
4712
4713 @kindex NOLOAD
4714 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4715 @cindex loading, preventing
4716 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4717 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4718 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4719 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4720 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4721 @smallexample
4722 @group
4723 SECTIONS @{
4724 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4725 @dots{}
4726 @}
4727 @end group
4728 @end smallexample
4729
4730 @node Output Section LMA
4731 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4732 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4733 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4734 @cindex load address
4735 @cindex section load address
4736 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4737 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4738 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4739 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4740 address is optional.
4741
4742 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4743 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4744 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4745 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4746 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4747
4748 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4749 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4750 load address:
4751
4752 @itemize @bullet
4753 @item
4754 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4755 the LMA address as well.
4756
4757 @item
4758 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4759
4760 @item
4761 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4762 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4763 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4764 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4765 the last section in the located region.
4766
4767 @item
4768 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4769 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4770
4771 @item
4772 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4773 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4774 @end itemize
4775
4776 @cindex ROM initialized data
4777 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4778 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4779 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4780 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4781 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4782 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4783 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4784 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4785 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4786
4787 @smallexample
4788 @group
4789 SECTIONS
4790 @{
4791 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4792 .mdata 0x2000 :
4793 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4794 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4795 .bss 0x3000 :
4796 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4797 @}
4798 @end group
4799 @end smallexample
4800
4801 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4802 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4803 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4804 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4805 script.
4806
4807 @smallexample
4808 @group
4809 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4810 char *src = &_etext;
4811 char *dst = &_data;
4812
4813 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4814 while (dst < &_edata)
4815 *dst++ = *src++;
4816
4817 /* Zero bss. */
4818 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4819 *dst = 0;
4820 @end group
4821 @end smallexample
4822
4823 @node Forced Output Alignment
4824 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4825 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4826 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4827 @cindex output section alignment
4828 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4829 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4830 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4831
4832 @node Forced Input Alignment
4833 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4834 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4835 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4836 @cindex input section alignment
4837 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4838 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4839 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4840
4841 @node Output Section Constraint
4842 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4843 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4844 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4845 @cindex constraints on output sections
4846 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4847 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4848 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4849 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4850
4851 @node Output Section Region
4852 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4853 @kindex >@var{region}
4854 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4855 @cindex memory regions and sections
4856 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4857 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4858
4859 Here is a simple example:
4860 @smallexample
4861 @group
4862 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4863 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4864 @end group
4865 @end smallexample
4866
4867 @node Output Section Phdr
4868 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4869 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4870 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4871 @cindex program headers and sections
4872 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4873 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4874 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4875 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4876 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4877 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4878
4879 Here is a simple example:
4880 @smallexample
4881 @group
4882 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4883 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4884 @end group
4885 @end smallexample
4886
4887 @node Output Section Fill
4888 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4889 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4890 @cindex section fill pattern
4891 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4892 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4893 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4894 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4895 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4896 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4897 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4898 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4899 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4900 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4901 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4902 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4903 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4904
4905 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4906 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4907
4908 Here is a simple example:
4909 @smallexample
4910 @group
4911 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4912 @end group
4913 @end smallexample
4914
4915 @node Overlay Description
4916 @subsection Overlay Description
4917 @kindex OVERLAY
4918 @cindex overlays
4919 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4920 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4921 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4922 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4923 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4924 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4925 than another.
4926
4927 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4928 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4929 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4930 command is as follows:
4931 @smallexample
4932 @group
4933 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4934 @{
4935 @var{secname1}
4936 @{
4937 @var{output-section-command}
4938 @var{output-section-command}
4939 @dots{}
4940 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4941 @var{secname2}
4942 @{
4943 @var{output-section-command}
4944 @var{output-section-command}
4945 @dots{}
4946 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4947 @dots{}
4948 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4949 @end group
4950 @end smallexample
4951
4952 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4953 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4954 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4955 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4956 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4957 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4958
4959 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4960 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4961
4962 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4963 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4964 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4965 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4966 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4967 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4968
4969 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4970 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4971 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4972 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4973 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4974
4975 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4976 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4977 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4978 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4979 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4980 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4981 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4982
4983 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4984 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4985
4986 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4987 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4988 @smallexample
4989 @group
4990 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4991 @{
4992 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4993 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4994 @}
4995 @end group
4996 @end smallexample
4997 @noindent
4998 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4999 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5000 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5001 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5002 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5003 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5004
5005 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5006 like the following.
5007
5008 @smallexample
5009 @group
5010 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5011 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5012 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5013 @end group
5014 @end smallexample
5015
5016 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5017 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5018 example could have been written identically as follows.
5019
5020 @smallexample
5021 @group
5022 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5023 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5024 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5025 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5026 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5027 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5028 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5029 @end group
5030 @end smallexample
5031
5032 @node MEMORY
5033 @section MEMORY Command
5034 @kindex MEMORY
5035 @cindex memory regions
5036 @cindex regions of memory
5037 @cindex allocating memory
5038 @cindex discontinuous memory
5039 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5040 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5041
5042 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5043 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5044 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5045 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5046 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5047 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5048 around to fit into the available regions.
5049
5050 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5051 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5052 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5053 @code{MEMORY} is:
5054 @smallexample
5055 @group
5056 MEMORY
5057 @{
5058 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5059 @dots{}
5060 @}
5061 @end group
5062 @end smallexample
5063
5064 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5065 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5066 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5067 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5068 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5069 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5070 command.
5071
5072 @cindex memory region attributes
5073 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5074 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5075 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5076 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5077 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5078 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5079 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5080
5081 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5082 @table @samp
5083 @item R
5084 Read-only section
5085 @item W
5086 Read/write section
5087 @item X
5088 Executable section
5089 @item A
5090 Allocatable section
5091 @item I
5092 Initialized section
5093 @item L
5094 Same as @samp{I}
5095 @item !
5096 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5097 @end table
5098
5099 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5100 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5101 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5102 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5103 attributes.
5104
5105 @kindex ORIGIN =
5106 @kindex o =
5107 @kindex org =
5108 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5109 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5110 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5111 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5112 @code{ORG}).
5113
5114 @kindex LENGTH =
5115 @kindex len =
5116 @kindex l =
5117 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5118 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5119 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5120 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5121
5122 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5123 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5124 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5125 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5126 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5127 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5128 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5129 region.
5130
5131 @smallexample
5132 @group
5133 MEMORY
5134 @{
5135 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5136 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5137 @}
5138 @end group
5139 @end smallexample
5140
5141 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5142 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5143 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5144 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5145 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5146 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5147 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5148 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5149 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5150
5151 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5152 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5153 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5154
5155 @smallexample
5156 @group
5157 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5158 @end group
5159 @end smallexample
5160
5161 @node PHDRS
5162 @section PHDRS Command
5163 @kindex PHDRS
5164 @cindex program headers
5165 @cindex ELF program headers
5166 @cindex program segments
5167 @cindex segments, ELF
5168 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5169 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5170 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5171 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5172
5173 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5174 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5175 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5176 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5177 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5178
5179 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5180 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5181 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5182 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5183 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5184
5185 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5186 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5187 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5188
5189 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5190 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5191
5192 @smallexample
5193 @group
5194 PHDRS
5195 @{
5196 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5197 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5198 @}
5199 @end group
5200 @end smallexample
5201
5202 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5203 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5204 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5205 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5206 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5207 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5208
5209 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5210 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5211 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5212 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5213 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5214 Section Phdr}.
5215
5216 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5217 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5218 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5219 contain the section.
5220
5221 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5222 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5223 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5224 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5225 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5226 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5227 segment at all.
5228
5229 @kindex FILEHDR
5230 @kindex PHDRS
5231 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5232 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5233 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5234 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5235 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5236 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5237 these keywords.
5238
5239 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5240 value of the keyword.
5241
5242 @table @asis
5243 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5244 Indicates an unused program header.
5245
5246 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5247 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5248 the file.
5249
5250 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5251 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5252
5253 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5254 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5255 found.
5256
5257 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5258 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5259
5260 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5261 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5262 ABI.
5263
5264 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5265 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5266
5267 @item @var{expression}
5268 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5269 be used for types not defined above.
5270 @end table
5271
5272 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5273 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5274 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5275 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5276 output section attribute.
5277
5278 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5279 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5280 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5281 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5282 header.
5283
5284 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5285 headers used on a native ELF system.
5286
5287 @example
5288 @group
5289 PHDRS
5290 @{
5291 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5292 interp PT_INTERP ;
5293 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5294 data PT_LOAD ;
5295 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5296 @}
5297
5298 SECTIONS
5299 @{
5300 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5301 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5302 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5303 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5304 @dots{}
5305 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5306 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5307 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5308 @dots{}
5309 @}
5310 @end group
5311 @end example
5312
5313 @node VERSION
5314 @section VERSION Command
5315 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5316 @cindex symbol versions
5317 @cindex version script
5318 @cindex versions of symbols
5319 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5320 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5321 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5322 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5323 shared library.
5324
5325 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5326 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5327 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5328
5329 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5330 @smallexample
5331 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5332 @end smallexample
5333
5334 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5335 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5336 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5337 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5338 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5339 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5340 library.
5341
5342 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5343 examples.
5344
5345 @smallexample
5346 VERS_1.1 @{
5347 global:
5348 foo1;
5349 local:
5350 old*;
5351 original*;
5352 new*;
5353 @};
5354
5355 VERS_1.2 @{
5356 foo2;
5357 @} VERS_1.1;
5358
5359 VERS_2.0 @{
5360 bar1; bar2;
5361 extern "C++" @{
5362 ns::*;
5363 "f(int, double)";
5364 @};
5365 @} VERS_1.2;
5366 @end smallexample
5367
5368 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5369 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5370 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5371 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5372 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5373 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5374 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5375 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5376 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5377 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5378
5379 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5380 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5381 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5382
5383 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5384 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5385 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5386
5387 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5388 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5389 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5390 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5391 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5392 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5393 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5394 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5395 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5396
5397 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5398 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5399 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5400 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5401
5402 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5403 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5404 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5405 won't.
5406
5407 @smallexample
5408 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5409 @end smallexample
5410
5411 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5412 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5413 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5414 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5415 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5416 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5417 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5418 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5419 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5420 search for each symbol reference.
5421
5422 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5423 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5424 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5425 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5426 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5427 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5428 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5429 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5430 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5431
5432 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5433 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5434 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5435 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5436 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5437 @smallexample
5438 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5439 @end smallexample
5440 @noindent
5441 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5442 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5443 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5444 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5445 takes precedence over a version script.
5446
5447 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5448 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5449 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5450 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5451 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5452
5453 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5454 source file. Here is an example:
5455
5456 @smallexample
5457 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5458 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5459 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5460 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5461 @end smallexample
5462
5463 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5464 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5465 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5466 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5467
5468 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5469 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5470 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5471 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5472 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5473 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5474
5475 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5476 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5477 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5478 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5479
5480 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5481
5482 @smallexample
5483 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5484 @end smallexample
5485
5486 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5487 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5488 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5489 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5490 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5491
5492 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5493 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5494 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5495 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5496 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5497 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5498 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5499 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5500 expect when you upgrade.
5501
5502 @node Expressions
5503 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5504 @cindex expressions
5505 @cindex arithmetic
5506 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5507 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5508 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5509 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5510
5511 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5512
5513 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5514 expressions.
5515
5516 @menu
5517 * Constants:: Constants
5518 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5519 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5520 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5521 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5522 * Operators:: Operators
5523 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5524 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5525 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5526 @end menu
5527
5528 @node Constants
5529 @subsection Constants
5530 @cindex integer notation
5531 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5532 All constants are integers.
5533
5534 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5535 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5536 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5537 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5538 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5539 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5540
5541 @cindex scaled integers
5542 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5543 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5544 @cindex suffixes for integers
5545 @cindex integer suffixes
5546 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5547 constant by
5548 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5549 @ifnottex
5550 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5551 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5552 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5553 @end ifnottex
5554 @tex
5555 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5556 @end tex
5557 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5558 respectively. For example, the following
5559 all refer to the same quantity:
5560
5561 @smallexample
5562 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5563 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5564 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5565 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5566 @end smallexample
5567
5568 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5569 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5570
5571 @node Symbolic Constants
5572 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5573 @cindex symbolic constants
5574 @kindex CONSTANT
5575 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5576 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5577
5578 @table @code
5579 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5580 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5581 The target's maximum page size.
5582
5583 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5584 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5585 The target's default page size.
5586 @end table
5587
5588 So for example:
5589
5590 @smallexample
5591 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5592 @end smallexample
5593
5594 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5595 supported by the target.
5596
5597 @node Symbols
5598 @subsection Symbol Names
5599 @cindex symbol names
5600 @cindex names
5601 @cindex quoted symbol names
5602 @kindex "
5603 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5604 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5605 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5606 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5607 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5608 @smallexample
5609 "SECTION" = 9;
5610 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5611 @end smallexample
5612
5613 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5614 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5615 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5616
5617 @node Orphan Sections
5618 @subsection Orphan Sections
5619 @cindex orphan
5620 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5621 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5622 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5623 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5624 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5625 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5626 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5627 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5628 at the end of the file.
5629
5630 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5631 well as section flag.
5632
5633 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5634 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5635 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5636
5637 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5638 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5639 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5640 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5641 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5642 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5643 character.
5644
5645 @node Location Counter
5646 @subsection The Location Counter
5647 @kindex .
5648 @cindex dot
5649 @cindex location counter
5650 @cindex current output location
5651 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5652 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5653 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5654 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5655 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5656
5657 @cindex holes
5658 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5659 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5660 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5661 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5662 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5663
5664 @smallexample
5665 SECTIONS
5666 @{
5667 output :
5668 @{
5669 file1(.text)
5670 . = . + 1000;
5671 file2(.text)
5672 . += 1000;
5673 file3(.text)
5674 @} = 0x12345678;
5675 @}
5676 @end smallexample
5677 @noindent
5678 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5679 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5680 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5681 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5682 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5683 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5684
5685 @cindex dot inside sections
5686 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5687 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5688 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5689 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5690 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5691 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5692
5693 @smallexample
5694 SECTIONS
5695 @{
5696 . = 0x100
5697 .text: @{
5698 *(.text)
5699 . = 0x200
5700 @}
5701 . = 0x500
5702 .data: @{
5703 *(.data)
5704 . += 0x600
5705 @}
5706 @}
5707 @end smallexample
5708
5709 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5710 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5711 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5712 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5713 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5714 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5715 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5716 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5717
5718 @cindex dot outside sections
5719 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5720 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5721 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5722
5723 @smallexample
5724 SECTIONS
5725 @{
5726 start_of_text = . ;
5727 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5728 end_of_text = . ;
5729
5730 start_of_data = . ;
5731 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5732 end_of_data = . ;
5733 @}
5734 @end smallexample
5735
5736 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5737 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5738 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5739 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5740 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5741 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5742 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5743 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5744 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5745 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5746 as follows:
5747
5748 @smallexample
5749 SECTIONS
5750 @{
5751 start_of_text = . ;
5752 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5753 end_of_text = . ;
5754
5755 start_of_data = . ;
5756 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5757 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5758 end_of_data = . ;
5759 @}
5760 @end smallexample
5761
5762 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5763 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5764 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5765 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5766 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5767 section. So you could write:
5768
5769 @smallexample
5770 SECTIONS
5771 @{
5772 start_of_text = . ;
5773 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5774 end_of_text = . ;
5775
5776 . = . ;
5777 start_of_data = . ;
5778 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5779 end_of_data = . ;
5780 @}
5781 @end smallexample
5782
5783 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5784 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5785
5786 @need 2000
5787 @node Operators
5788 @subsection Operators
5789 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5790 @cindex arithmetic operators
5791 @cindex precedence in expressions
5792 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5793 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5794 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5795 @ifnottex
5796 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5797 @smallexample
5798 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5799 (highest)
5800 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5801 2 left * / %
5802 3 left + -
5803 4 left >> <<
5804 5 left == != > < <= >=
5805 6 left &
5806 7 left |
5807 8 left &&
5808 9 left ||
5809 10 right ? :
5810 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5811 (lowest)
5812 @end smallexample
5813 Notes:
5814 (1) Prefix operators
5815 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5816 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5817 @end ifnottex
5818 @tex
5819 \vskip \baselineskip
5820 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5821 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5822 \hrule
5823 \halign
5824 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5825 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5826 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5827 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5828 \noalign{\hrule}
5829 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5830 &highest&&&&&\cr
5831 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5832 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5833 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5834 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5835 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5836 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5837 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5838 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5839 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5840 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5841 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5842 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5843 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5844 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5845 \hrule}
5846 @end tex
5847 @iftex
5848 {
5849 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5850 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5851 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5852 }
5853 @end iftex
5854 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5855
5856 @node Evaluation
5857 @subsection Evaluation
5858 @cindex lazy evaluation
5859 @cindex expression evaluation order
5860 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5861 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5862
5863 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5864 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5865 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5866 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5867
5868 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5869 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5870 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5871 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5872
5873 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5874 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5875 allocation.
5876
5877 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5878 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5879
5880 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5881 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5882 following
5883 @smallexample
5884 @group
5885 SECTIONS
5886 @{
5887 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5888 @{ *(.text) @}
5889 @}
5890 @end group
5891 @end smallexample
5892 @noindent
5893 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5894 address}.
5895
5896 @node Expression Section
5897 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5898 @cindex expression sections
5899 @cindex absolute expressions
5900 @cindex relative expressions
5901 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5902 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5903 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5904 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5905 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5906 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5907 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5908 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5909 operations.
5910
5911 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5912 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5913 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5914 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5915 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5916 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5917 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5918 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5919 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5920 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5921 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5922 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5923 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5924 everywhere.
5925
5926 In the following simple example,
5927
5928 @smallexample
5929 @group
5930 SECTIONS
5931 @{
5932 . = 0x100;
5933 __executable_start = 0x100;
5934 .data :
5935 @{
5936 . = 0x10;
5937 __data_start = 0x10;
5938 *(.data)
5939 @}
5940 @dots{}
5941 @}
5942 @end group
5943 @end smallexample
5944
5945 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5946 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5947 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5948 section in the second two assignments.
5949
5950 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5951 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5952
5953 @itemize @bullet
5954 @item
5955 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5956 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5957 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5958 @item
5959 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5960 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5961 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5962 @item
5963 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5964 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5965 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5966 before applying the operator.
5967 @end itemize
5968
5969 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5970
5971 @itemize @bullet
5972 @item
5973 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5974 @item
5975 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5976 @item
5977 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5978 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5979 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5980 @item
5981 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5982 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5983 section as the relative operand(s).
5984 @item
5985 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5986 conversions) is an absolute address.
5987 @end itemize
5988
5989 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5990 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5991 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5992 section @samp{.data}:
5993 @smallexample
5994 SECTIONS
5995 @{
5996 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5997 @}
5998 @end smallexample
5999 @noindent
6000 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6001 @samp{.data} section.
6002
6003 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6004 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6005
6006 @node Builtin Functions
6007 @subsection Builtin Functions
6008 @cindex functions in expressions
6009 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6010 use in linker script expressions.
6011
6012 @table @code
6013 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6014 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6015 @cindex expression, absolute
6016 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6017 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6018 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6019 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6020
6021 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6022 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6023 @cindex section address in expression
6024 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6025 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6026 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6027 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6028 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6029 the other two will be absolute:
6030 @smallexample
6031 @group
6032 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6033 .output1 :
6034 @{
6035 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6036 @dots{}
6037 @}
6038 .output :
6039 @{
6040 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6041 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6042 @}
6043 @dots{} @}
6044 @end group
6045 @end smallexample
6046
6047 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6048 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6049 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6050 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6051 @cindex round up location counter
6052 @cindex align location counter
6053 @cindex round up expression
6054 @cindex align expression
6055 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6056 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6057 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6058 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6059 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6060 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6061
6062 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6063 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6064 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6065 input sections:
6066 @smallexample
6067 @group
6068 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6069 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6070 *(.data)
6071 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6072 @}
6073 @dots{} @}
6074 @end group
6075 @end smallexample
6076 @noindent
6077 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6078 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6079 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6080 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6081
6082 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6083
6084 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6085 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6086 @cindex section alignment
6087 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6088 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6089 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6090 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6091 value in that section.
6092 @smallexample
6093 @group
6094 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6095 .output @{
6096 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6097 @dots{}
6098 @}
6099 @dots{} @}
6100 @end group
6101 @end smallexample
6102
6103 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6104 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6105 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6106 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6107 section.
6108
6109 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6110 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6111 This is equivalent to either
6112 @smallexample
6113 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6114 @end smallexample
6115 or
6116 @smallexample
6117 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6118 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6119 @end smallexample
6120 @noindent
6121 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6122 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6123 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6124 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6125 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6126 bytes in the on-disk file.
6127
6128 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6129 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6130 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6131 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6132 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6133
6134 @noindent
6135 Example:
6136 @smallexample
6137 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6138 @end smallexample
6139
6140 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6141 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6142 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6143 evaluation purposes.
6144
6145 @smallexample
6146 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6147 @end smallexample
6148
6149 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6150 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6151 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6152 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6153 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6154 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6155 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6156 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6157 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6158 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6159 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6160 section alignment.
6161
6162 @smallexample
6163 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6164 @end smallexample
6165
6166 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6167 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6168 @cindex symbol defaults
6169 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6170 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6171 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6172 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6173 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6174 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6175 existed, its value is preserved:
6176
6177 @smallexample
6178 @group
6179 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6180 .text : @{
6181 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6182 @dots{}
6183 @}
6184 @dots{}
6185 @}
6186 @end group
6187 @end smallexample
6188
6189 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6190 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6191 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6192
6193 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6194 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6195 @cindex section load address in expression
6196 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6197 Section LMA}).
6198
6199 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6200 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6201 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6202 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6203
6204 @kindex MAX
6205 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6206 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6207
6208 @kindex MIN
6209 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6210 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6211
6212 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6213 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6214 @cindex unallocated address, next
6215 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6216 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6217 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6218 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6219
6220 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6221 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6222 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6223
6224 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6225 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6226 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6227 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6228 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6229 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6230 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6231 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6232 name.
6233
6234 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6235 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6236 @cindex section size
6237 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6238 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6239 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6240 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6241 @smallexample
6242 @group
6243 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6244 .output @{
6245 .start = . ;
6246 @dots{}
6247 .end = . ;
6248 @}
6249 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6250 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6251 @dots{} @}
6252 @end group
6253 @end smallexample
6254
6255 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6256 @itemx sizeof_headers
6257 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6258 @cindex header size
6259 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6260 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6261 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6262 choose, to facilitate paging.
6263
6264 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6265 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6266 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6267 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6268 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6269 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6270 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6271 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6272 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6273 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6274 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6275 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6276 @end table
6277
6278 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6279 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6280 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6281 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6282 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6283 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6284 linker will report an error.
6285
6286 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6287
6288 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6289 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6290 commands.
6291
6292 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6293 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6294 read. This can affect archive searching.
6295
6296 @ifset GENERIC
6297 @node Machine Dependent
6298 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6299
6300 @cindex machine dependencies
6301 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6302 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6303 functionality are not listed.
6304
6305 @menu
6306 @ifset H8300
6307 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6308 @end ifset
6309 @ifset I960
6310 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6311 @end ifset
6312 @ifset M68HC11
6313 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6314 @end ifset
6315 @ifset ARM
6316 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6317 @end ifset
6318 @ifset HPPA
6319 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6320 @end ifset
6321 @ifset M68K
6322 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6323 @end ifset
6324 @ifset MIPS
6325 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6326 @end ifset
6327 @ifset MMIX
6328 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6329 @end ifset
6330 @ifset MSP430
6331 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6332 @end ifset
6333 @ifset NDS32
6334 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6335 @end ifset
6336 @ifset NIOSII
6337 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6338 @end ifset
6339 @ifset POWERPC
6340 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6341 @end ifset
6342 @ifset POWERPC64
6343 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6344 @end ifset
6345 @ifset SPU
6346 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6347 @end ifset
6348 @ifset TICOFF
6349 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6350 @end ifset
6351 @ifset WIN32
6352 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6353 @end ifset
6354 @ifset XTENSA
6355 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6356 @end ifset
6357 @end menu
6358 @end ifset
6359
6360 @ifset H8300
6361 @ifclear GENERIC
6362 @raisesections
6363 @end ifclear
6364
6365 @node H8/300
6366 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6367
6368 @cindex H8/300 support
6369 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6370 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6371
6372 @table @emph
6373 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6374 @item relaxing address modes
6375 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6376 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6377 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6378 respectively.
6379
6380 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6381 @item synthesizing instructions
6382 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6383 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6384 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6385 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6386 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6387 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6388 top page of memory).
6389
6390 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6391 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6392 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6393 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6394 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6395 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6396 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6397
6398 @item bit manipulation instructions
6399 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6400 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6401 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6402 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6403 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6404 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6405 the top page of memory).
6406
6407 @item system control instructions
6408 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6409 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6410 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6411 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6412 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6413 the top page of memory).
6414 @end table
6415
6416 @ifclear GENERIC
6417 @lowersections
6418 @end ifclear
6419 @end ifset
6420
6421 @ifclear GENERIC
6422 @ifset Renesas
6423 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6424 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6425 @node Renesas
6426 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6427
6428 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6429 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6430 options are required for these chips.
6431 @end ifset
6432 @end ifclear
6433
6434 @ifset I960
6435 @ifclear GENERIC
6436 @raisesections
6437 @end ifclear
6438
6439 @node i960
6440 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6441
6442 @cindex i960 support
6443
6444 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6445 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6446 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6447 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6448 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6449 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6450 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6451
6452 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6453 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6454 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6455 the names
6456
6457 @smallexample
6458 @group
6459 try
6460 libtry.a
6461 tryca
6462 libtryca.a
6463 @end group
6464 @end smallexample
6465
6466 @noindent
6467 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6468 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6469
6470 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6471 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6472 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6473 specifies a library.
6474
6475 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6476 @cindex relaxing on i960
6477 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6478 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6479 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6480 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6481 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6482 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6483 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6484 not itself call any subroutines).
6485
6486 @ifclear GENERIC
6487 @lowersections
6488 @end ifclear
6489 @end ifset
6490
6491 @ifset ARM
6492 @ifclear GENERIC
6493 @raisesections
6494 @end ifclear
6495
6496 @ifset M68HC11
6497 @ifclear GENERIC
6498 @raisesections
6499 @end ifclear
6500
6501 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6502 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6503
6504 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6505
6506 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6507
6508 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6509 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6510
6511 @table @emph
6512 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6513 @item relaxing address modes
6514 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6515 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6516 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6517 respectively.
6518
6519 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6520 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6521 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6522
6523 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6524 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6525 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6526 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6527 @code{bset} instructions.
6528
6529 @end table
6530
6531 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6532
6533 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6534 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6535 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6536 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6537 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6538 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6539 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6540 point to the function trampoline.
6541
6542 @ifclear GENERIC
6543 @lowersections
6544 @end ifclear
6545 @end ifset
6546
6547 @node ARM
6548 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6549
6550 @cindex ARM interworking support
6551 @kindex --support-old-code
6552 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6553 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6554 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6555 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6556 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6557 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6558 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6559 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6560 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6561 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6562
6563 @cindex thumb entry point
6564 @cindex entry point, thumb
6565 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6566 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6567 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6568 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6569 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6570 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6571
6572 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6573 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6574 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6575 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6576 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6577 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6578
6579 @cindex BE8
6580 @kindex --be8
6581 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6582 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6583 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6584 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6585 little-endian code.
6586
6587 @cindex TARGET1
6588 @kindex --target1-rel
6589 @kindex --target1-abs
6590 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6591 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6592 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6593 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6594
6595 @cindex TARGET2
6596 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6597 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6598 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6599 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6600 @table @samp
6601 @item rel
6602 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6603 @item abs
6604 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6605 @item got-rel
6606 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6607 @end table
6608
6609 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6610 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6611 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6612 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6613 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6614 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6615
6616 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6617 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6618 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6619
6620 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6621 relocations are ignored.
6622
6623 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6624 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6625 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6626 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6627
6628 @smallexample
6629 TST rM, #1
6630 MOVEQ PC, rM
6631 BX Rn
6632 @end smallexample
6633
6634 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6635 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6636 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6637
6638 @cindex USE_BLX
6639 @kindex --use-blx
6640 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6641 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6642 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6643 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6644 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6645
6646 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6647 specify it if you are using that target.
6648
6649 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6650 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6651 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6652 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6653 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6654 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6655 the support code can read the intended values.
6656
6657 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6658 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6659 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6660 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6661 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6662 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6663
6664 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6665 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6666 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6667 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6668 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6669 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6670
6671 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6672 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6673 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6674 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6675 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6676 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6677 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6678
6679 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6680 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6681 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6682 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6683 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6684 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6685 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6686
6687 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6688 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6689 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6690
6691 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6692 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6693
6694 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6695 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6696 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6697 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6698 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6699 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6700 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6701 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6702
6703 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6704 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6705
6706 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6707 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6708 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6709 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6710 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6711
6712 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6713 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6714 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6715 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6716 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6717 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6718
6719 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6720 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6721
6722 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6723 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6724 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6725 occurs.
6726
6727 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6728 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6729 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6730 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6731 occurs.
6732
6733 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6734 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6735 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6736 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6737 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6738 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6739 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6740 not be diagnosed.
6741
6742 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6743 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6744 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6745 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6746 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6747 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6748 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6749
6750 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6751 @kindex --pic-veneer
6752 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6753 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6754 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6755 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6756
6757 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6758 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6759 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6760 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6761 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6762 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6763 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6764 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6765 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6766 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6767 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6768 where they should be placed.
6769
6770 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6771 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6772 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6773 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6774 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6775 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6776 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6777 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6778 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6779 from the input sections.
6780
6781 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6782 @samp{N = +1}.
6783
6784 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6785 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6786 otherwise.
6787
6788 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6789 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6790 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6791 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6792
6793 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6794
6795 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6796 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6797 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6798 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6799
6800 Please contact ARM for further details.
6801
6802 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6803 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6804 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6805 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6806
6807 @kindex --long-plt
6808 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6809 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6810 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6811 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6812
6813 @ifclear GENERIC
6814 @lowersections
6815 @end ifclear
6816 @end ifset
6817
6818 @ifset HPPA
6819 @ifclear GENERIC
6820 @raisesections
6821 @end ifclear
6822
6823 @node HPPA ELF32
6824 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6825 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6826 @kindex --multi-subspace
6827 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6828 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6829 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6830 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6831 multiple sub-spaces.
6832
6833 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6834 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6835 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6836 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6837 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6838 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6839 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6840 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6841 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6842 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6843 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6844 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6845 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6846 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6847 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6848 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6849
6850 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6851 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6852 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6853 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6854
6855 @ifclear GENERIC
6856 @lowersections
6857 @end ifclear
6858 @end ifset
6859
6860 @ifset M68K
6861 @ifclear GENERIC
6862 @raisesections
6863 @end ifclear
6864
6865 @node M68K
6866 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6867
6868 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6869 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6870 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6871 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6872 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6873 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6874 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6875 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6876 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6877 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6878 support such GOTs.
6879 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6880 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6881 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6882 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6883
6884 @ifclear GENERIC
6885 @lowersections
6886 @end ifclear
6887 @end ifset
6888
6889 @ifset MIPS
6890 @ifclear GENERIC
6891 @raisesections
6892 @end ifclear
6893
6894 @node MIPS
6895 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6896
6897 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6898 @kindex --insn32
6899 @kindex --no-insn32
6900 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6901 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6902 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6903 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6904 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6905 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6906
6907 @ifclear GENERIC
6908 @lowersections
6909 @end ifclear
6910 @end ifset
6911
6912 @ifset MMIX
6913 @ifclear GENERIC
6914 @raisesections
6915 @end ifclear
6916
6917 @node MMIX
6918 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6919 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6920 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6921 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6922 can translate between the two formats.
6923
6924 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6925 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6926 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6927 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6928 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6929 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6930 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6931 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6932
6933 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6934 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6935 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6936 of a section.
6937
6938 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6939 are left out from an mmo file.
6940
6941 @ifclear GENERIC
6942 @lowersections
6943 @end ifclear
6944 @end ifset
6945
6946 @ifset MSP430
6947 @ifclear GENERIC
6948 @raisesections
6949 @end ifclear
6950
6951 @node MSP430
6952 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6953 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6954 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6955 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6956
6957 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6958 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6959
6960 @table @code
6961 @item @samp{.vectors}
6962 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6963
6964 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6965 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6966 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6967
6968 @item @samp{.infomem}
6969 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6970 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6971
6972 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6973 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6974 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6975
6976 @item @samp{.noinit}
6977 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6978
6979 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6980 @end table
6981
6982 @ifclear GENERIC
6983 @lowersections
6984 @end ifclear
6985 @end ifset
6986
6987 @ifset NDS32
6988 @ifclear GENERIC
6989 @raisesections
6990 @end ifclear
6991
6992 @node NDS32
6993 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6994 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6995 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6996 relaxes objects according to these options.
6997
6998 @table @code
6999 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7000 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7001
7002 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7003 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7004
7005 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7006 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7007
7008 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7009 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7010
7011 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7012 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7013
7014 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7015 Update the existing EX9 table.
7016
7017 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7018 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7019
7020 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7021 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7022
7023 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7024 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7025
7026 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7027 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7028 @end table
7029
7030 @ifclear GENERIC
7031 @lowersections
7032 @end ifclear
7033 @end ifset
7034
7035 @ifset NIOSII
7036 @ifclear GENERIC
7037 @raisesections
7038 @end ifclear
7039
7040 @node Nios II
7041 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7042 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7043 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7044
7045 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7046 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7047 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7048 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7049 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7050 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7051 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7052 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7053 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7054 larger than 256MB.
7055
7056 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7057 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7058 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7059 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7060 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7061 register as a temporary.
7062
7063 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7064 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7065 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7066
7067 @ifclear GENERIC
7068 @lowersections
7069 @end ifclear
7070 @end ifset
7071
7072 @ifset POWERPC
7073 @ifclear GENERIC
7074 @raisesections
7075 @end ifclear
7076
7077 @node PowerPC ELF32
7078 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7079 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7080 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7081 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7082 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7083 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7084 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7085 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7086 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7087 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7088 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7089 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7090 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7091
7092 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7093 @table @option
7094 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7095 @kindex --bss-plt
7096 @item --bss-plt
7097 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7098 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7099 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7100 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7101 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7102 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7103 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7104 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7105
7106 @kindex --secure-plt
7107 @item --secure-plt
7108 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7109 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7110 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7111 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7112 style BSS PLT.
7113
7114 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7115 @kindex --sdata-got
7116 @item --sdata-got
7117 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7118 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7119 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7120 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7121 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7122 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7123 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7124 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7125 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7126 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7127 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7128 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7129
7130 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7131 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7132 @item --emit-stub-syms
7133 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7134 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7135
7136 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7137 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7138 @item --no-tls-optimize
7139 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7140 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7141 disable the optimization.
7142 @end table
7143
7144 @ifclear GENERIC
7145 @lowersections
7146 @end ifclear
7147 @end ifset
7148
7149 @ifset POWERPC64
7150 @ifclear GENERIC
7151 @raisesections
7152 @end ifclear
7153
7154 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7155 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7156
7157 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7158 @table @option
7159 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7160 @kindex --stub-group-size
7161 @item --stub-group-size
7162 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7163 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7164 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7165 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7166 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7167 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7168 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7169 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7170 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7171 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7172 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7173 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7174 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7175 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7176
7177 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7178 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7179 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7180 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7181
7182 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7183 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7184 @item --emit-stub-syms
7185 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7186 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7187
7188 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7189 @kindex --dotsyms
7190 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7191 @item --dotsyms
7192 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7193 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7194 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7195 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7196 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7197 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7198 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7199 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7200 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7201 feature.
7202
7203 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7204 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7205 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7206 @item --save-restore-funcs
7207 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7208 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7209 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7210 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7211 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7212 link.
7213
7214 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7215 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7216 @item --no-tls-optimize
7217 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7218 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7219 disable the optimization.
7220
7221 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7222 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7223 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7224 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7225 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7226 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7227 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7228 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7229 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7230 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7231 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7232 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7233 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7234 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7235 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7236
7237 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7238 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7239 @item --no-opd-optimize
7240 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7241 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7242 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7243 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7244
7245 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7246 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7247 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7248 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7249 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7250 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7251 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7252
7253 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7254 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7255 @item --no-toc-optimize
7256 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7257 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7258 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7259 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7260 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7261 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7262 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7263 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7264 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7265 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7266 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7267 optimization.
7268
7269 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7270 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7271 @item --no-multi-toc
7272 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7273 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7274 where TOC
7275 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7276 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7277 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7278 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7279 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7280 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7281 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7282 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7283
7284 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7285 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7286 @item --no-toc-sort
7287 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7288 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7289 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7290 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7291 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7292 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7293 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7294 off this feature.
7295
7296 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7297 @kindex --plt-align
7298 @kindex --no-plt-align
7299 @item --plt-align
7300 @itemx --no-plt-align
7301 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7302 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7303 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7304 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7305 stubs are packed tightly.
7306
7307 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7308 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7309 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7310 @item --plt-static-chain
7311 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7312 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7313 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7314 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7315
7316 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7317 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7318 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7319 @item --plt-thread-safe
7320 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7321 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7322 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7323 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7324 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7325 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7326 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7327 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7328 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7329 default behaviour.
7330 @end table
7331
7332 @ifclear GENERIC
7333 @lowersections
7334 @end ifclear
7335 @end ifset
7336
7337 @ifset SPU
7338 @ifclear GENERIC
7339 @raisesections
7340 @end ifclear
7341
7342 @node SPU ELF
7343 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7344
7345 @cindex SPU ELF options
7346 @table @option
7347
7348 @cindex SPU plugins
7349 @kindex --plugin
7350 @item --plugin
7351 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7352
7353 @cindex SPU overlays
7354 @kindex --no-overlays
7355 @item --no-overlays
7356 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7357 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7358 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7359 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7360
7361 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7362 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7363 @item --emit-stub-syms
7364 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7365 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7366
7367 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7368 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7369 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7370 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7371 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7372 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7373
7374 @cindex SPU local store size
7375 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7376 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7377 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7378 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7379 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7380
7381 @cindex SPU
7382 @kindex --stack-analysis
7383 @item --stack-analysis
7384 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7385 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7386 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7387 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7388 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7389 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7390 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7391 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7392 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7393 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7394 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7395 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7396 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7397 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7398 and calls will be given.
7399
7400 @cindex SPU
7401 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7402 @item --emit-stack-syms
7403 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7404 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7405 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7406 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7407 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7408 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7409 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7410 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7411 @end table
7412
7413 @ifclear GENERIC
7414 @lowersections
7415 @end ifclear
7416 @end ifset
7417
7418 @ifset TICOFF
7419 @ifclear GENERIC
7420 @raisesections
7421 @end ifclear
7422
7423 @node TI COFF
7424 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7425 @cindex TI COFF versions
7426 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7427 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7428 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7429 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7430 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7431 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7432
7433 @ifclear GENERIC
7434 @lowersections
7435 @end ifclear
7436 @end ifset
7437
7438 @ifset WIN32
7439 @ifclear GENERIC
7440 @raisesections
7441 @end ifclear
7442
7443 @node WIN32
7444 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7445
7446 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7447 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7448 command line options mentioned here.
7449
7450 @table @emph
7451 @cindex import libraries
7452 @item import libraries
7453 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7454 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7455 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7456 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7457 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7458 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7459
7460 @item exporting DLL symbols
7461 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7462 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7463
7464 @table @emph
7465 @item using auto-export functionality
7466 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7467 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7468 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7469
7470 @itemize
7471 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7472 @item --exclude-symbols
7473 @item --exclude-libs
7474 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7475 @item --version-script
7476 @end itemize
7477
7478 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7479 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7480 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7481 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7482 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7483 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7484 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7485 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7486
7487 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7488 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7489 if either of the following are true:
7490
7491 @itemize
7492 @item A DEF file is used.
7493 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7494 @end itemize
7495
7496 @item using a DEF file
7497 @cindex using a DEF file
7498 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7499 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7500 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7501 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7502 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7503
7504 @example
7505 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7506 @end example
7507
7508 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7509 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7510
7511 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7512
7513 @example
7514 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7515
7516 EXPORTS
7517 foo
7518 bar
7519 _bar = bar
7520 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7521 var1 DATA
7522 doo = foo == foo2
7523 eoo DATA == var1
7524 @end example
7525
7526 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7527 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7528 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7529 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7530 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7531 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7532 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7533 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7534 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7535
7536 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7537 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7538 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7539
7540 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7541 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7542 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7543 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7544
7545 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7546 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7547 non-default base address for the image.
7548
7549 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7550 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7551 filename specified on the command line.
7552
7553 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7554
7555 @example
7556 EXPORTS
7557 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7558 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7559 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7560 @end example
7561
7562 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7563 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7564 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7565 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7566 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7567 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7568 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7569
7570 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7571
7572 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7573 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7574 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7575 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7576 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7577
7578 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7579 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7580 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7581 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7582
7583 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7584 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7585 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7586 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7587 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7588 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7589 application will behave unexpectedly.
7590
7591 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7592 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7593 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7594 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7595 the DLL without an import library.
7596
7597 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7598 other DEF file statements
7599
7600 @cindex creating a DEF file
7601 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7602 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7603
7604 @item Using decorations
7605 @cindex Using decorations
7606 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7607 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7608 declared as:
7609
7610 @example
7611 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7612 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7613 @end example
7614
7615 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7616 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7617 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7618 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7619
7620 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7621 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7622 instead:
7623
7624 @example
7625 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7626 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7627 @end example
7628
7629 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7630 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7631 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7632 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7633 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7634 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7635 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7636 information.
7637 @end table
7638
7639 @cindex automatic data imports
7640 @item automatic data imports
7641 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7642 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7643 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7644 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7645 code to these platforms, especially for large
7646 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7647 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7648 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7649 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7650 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7651 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7652 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7653 trigger the feature's use.
7654
7655 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7656 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7657
7658 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7659 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7660
7661 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7662 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7663 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7664 below.
7665
7666 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7667 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7668 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7669 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7670 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7671 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7672 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7673 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7674 references.
7675
7676 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7677 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7678 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7679 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7680 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7681 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7682 run without error on an older system.
7683
7684 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7685 enabled as needed.
7686
7687 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7688 @item direct linking to a dll
7689 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7690 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7691 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7692 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7693 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7694 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7695 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7696 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7697 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7698 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7699
7700 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7701 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7702 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7703 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7704 select the dll instead of an import library.
7705
7706
7707 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7708 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7709
7710 @example
7711 libxxx.dll.a
7712 xxx.dll.a
7713 libxxx.a
7714 xxx.lib
7715 cygxxx.dll (*)
7716 libxxx.dll
7717 xxx.dll
7718 @end example
7719
7720 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7721
7722 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7723 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7724 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7725 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7726 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7727
7728 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7729 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7730 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7731 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7732 could coexist on the same machine.
7733
7734 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7735 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7736 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7737
7738 @example
7739 bin/
7740 cygxxx.dll
7741 lib/
7742 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7743 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7744 @end example
7745
7746 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7747 done two ways:
7748
7749 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7750 @example
7751 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7752 @end example
7753
7754 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7755 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7756 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7757 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7758
7759 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7760 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7761 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7762 making the app/dll.
7763
7764 @example
7765 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7766 @end example
7767
7768 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7769
7770 @example
7771 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7772 @end example
7773
7774 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7775 perfectly legal
7776
7777 @example
7778 bin/
7779 cygxxx-5.dll
7780 lib/
7781 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7782 @end example
7783
7784 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7785 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7786 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7787
7788 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7789 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7790
7791 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7792 work with auto-imported data.
7793
7794 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7795 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7796 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7797 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7798 possible to do this without an import lib.
7799
7800 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7801 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7802 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7803 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7804
7805 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7806 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7807 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7808 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7809 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7810 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7811 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7812
7813 @item symbol aliasing
7814 @table @emph
7815 @item adding additional names
7816 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7817 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7818 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7819 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7820 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7821
7822 @example
7823 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7824
7825 EXPORTS
7826 foo
7827 _foo = foo
7828 @end example
7829
7830 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7831
7832 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7833 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7834
7835 @example
7836 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7837 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7838 @end example
7839
7840 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7841 symbols.
7842
7843 @item renaming symbols
7844 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7845 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7846 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7847 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7848 created). In the following example:
7849
7850 @example
7851 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7852
7853 EXPORTS
7854 _foo = foo
7855 @end example
7856
7857 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7858 @samp{_foo}.
7859 @end table
7860
7861 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7862 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7863 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7864 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7865 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7866 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7867 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7868 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7869 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7870 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7871 which is probably not what you wanted.
7872
7873 @cindex weak externals
7874 @item weak externals
7875 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7876 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7877 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7878 are three variants of weak externals:
7879 @itemize
7880 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7881 called lazy externals.
7882 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7883 This form is not presently implemented.
7884 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7885 implemented.
7886 @end itemize
7887 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7888 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7889 uses a default value.
7890
7891 @cindex aligned common symbols
7892 @item aligned common symbols
7893 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7894 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7895 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7896 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7897 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7898 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7899 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7900 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7901
7902 @end table
7903
7904 @ifclear GENERIC
7905 @lowersections
7906 @end ifclear
7907 @end ifset
7908
7909 @ifset XTENSA
7910 @ifclear GENERIC
7911 @raisesections
7912 @end ifclear
7913
7914 @node Xtensa
7915 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7916
7917 @cindex Xtensa processors
7918 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7919 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7920 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7921 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7922 example, with the command:
7923
7924 @smallexample
7925 SECTIONS
7926 @{
7927 .text : @{
7928 *(.literal .text)
7929 @}
7930 @}
7931 @end smallexample
7932
7933 @noindent
7934 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7935 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7936 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7937 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7938 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7939 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7940 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7941
7942 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7943 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7944 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7945 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7946 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7947 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7948 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7949 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7950 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7951 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7952 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7953 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7954
7955 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7956 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7957 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7958 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7959 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7960 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7961 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7962 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7963 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7964 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7965 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7966 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7967 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7968 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7969
7970 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7971 control the linker:
7972
7973 @cindex Xtensa options
7974 @table @option
7975 @item --size-opt
7976 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7977 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7978 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7979 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7980 preserve the correctness of the code.
7981 @end table
7982
7983 @ifclear GENERIC
7984 @lowersections
7985 @end ifclear
7986 @end ifset
7987
7988 @ifclear SingleFormat
7989 @node BFD
7990 @chapter BFD
7991
7992 @cindex back end
7993 @cindex object file management
7994 @cindex object formats available
7995 @kindex objdump -i
7996 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7997 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7998 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7999 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8000 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8001 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8002 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8003 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8004 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8005
8006 @cindex BFD requirements
8007 @cindex requirements for BFD
8008 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8009 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8010 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8011 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8012 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8013 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8014 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8015
8016 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8017 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8018 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8019 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8020
8021 @menu
8022 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8023 @end menu
8024
8025 @node BFD outline
8026 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8027 @cindex opening object files
8028 @include bfdsumm.texi
8029 @end ifclear
8030
8031 @node Reporting Bugs
8032 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8033 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8034 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8035
8036 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8037
8038 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8039 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8040 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8041 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8042 @command{ld}.
8043
8044 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8045 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8046
8047 @menu
8048 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8049 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8050 @end menu
8051
8052 @node Bug Criteria
8053 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8054 @cindex bug criteria
8055
8056 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8057
8058 @itemize @bullet
8059 @cindex fatal signal
8060 @cindex linker crash
8061 @cindex crash of linker
8062 @item
8063 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8064 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8065
8066 @cindex error on valid input
8067 @item
8068 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8069
8070 @cindex invalid input
8071 @item
8072 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8073 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8074 object files are correct.
8075
8076 @item
8077 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8078 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8079 @end itemize
8080
8081 @node Bug Reporting
8082 @section How to Report Bugs
8083 @cindex bug reports
8084 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8085
8086 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8087 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8088 recommend you contact that organization first.
8089
8090 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8091 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8092 distribution.
8093
8094 @ifset BUGURL
8095 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8096 @value{BUGURL}.
8097 @end ifset
8098
8099 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8100 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8101 fact or leave it out, state it!
8102
8103 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8104 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8105 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8106 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8107 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8108 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8109 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8110 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8111 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8112 and the most helpful.
8113
8114 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8115 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8116 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8117
8118 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8119 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8120 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8121 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8122
8123 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8124
8125 @itemize @bullet
8126 @item
8127 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8128 the @samp{--version} argument.
8129
8130 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8131 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8132
8133 @item
8134 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8135 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8136
8137 @item
8138 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8139 version number.
8140
8141 @item
8142 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8143 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8144
8145 @item
8146 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8147 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8148 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8149 sufficient.
8150
8151 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8152 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8153
8154 @item
8155 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8156 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8157 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8158 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8159 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8160 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8161 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8162 attachments are best.
8163
8164 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8165 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8166 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8167 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8168 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8169
8170 @item
8171 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8172 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8173
8174 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8175 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8176 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8177 a chance to make a mistake.
8178
8179 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8180 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8181 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8182 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8183 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8184 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8185 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8186 any conclusion from our observations.
8187
8188 @item
8189 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8190 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8191 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8192 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8193 context, not by line number.
8194
8195 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8196 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8197 @end itemize
8198
8199 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8200
8201 @itemize @bullet
8202 @item
8203 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8204
8205 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8206 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8207 changes will not affect it.
8208
8209 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8210 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8211 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8212 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8213
8214 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8215 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8216 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8217 less time, and so on.
8218
8219 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8220 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8221
8222 @item
8223 A patch for the bug.
8224
8225 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8226 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8227 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8228 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8229
8230 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8231 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8232 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8233 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8234 fixed.
8235
8236 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8237 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8238 help us to understand.
8239
8240 @item
8241 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8242
8243 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8244 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8245 @end itemize
8246
8247 @node MRI
8248 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8249 @cindex MRI compatibility
8250 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8251 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8252 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8253 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8254 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8255 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8256 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8257
8258 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8259 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8260 features to make use of them.
8261
8262 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8263 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8264
8265 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8266 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8267 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8268 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8269 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8270
8271 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8272
8273 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8274 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8275 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8276
8277 @table @code
8278 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8279 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8280 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8281 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8282 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8283 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8284 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8285 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8286 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8287 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8288 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8289
8290 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8291 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8292 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8293 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8294
8295 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8296
8297 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8298 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8299 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8300 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8301
8302 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8303 @item BASE @var{expression}
8304 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8305 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8306
8307 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8308 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8309 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8310 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8311
8312 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8313 @item END
8314 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8315
8316 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8317 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8318 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8319 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8320
8321 @enumerate
8322 @item
8323 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8324
8325 @item
8326 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8327
8328 @item
8329 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8330 @samp{COFF}
8331 @end enumerate
8332
8333 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8334 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8335 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8336 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8337
8338 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8339 same line, with no change in its effect.
8340
8341 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8342 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8343 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8344 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8345 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8346 command line.
8347
8348 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8349 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8350 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8351 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8352 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8353
8354 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8355 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8356 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8357 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8358 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8359 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8360 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8361 file, in the order specified.
8362
8363 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8364 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8365 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8366 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8367 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8368 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8369
8370 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8371 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8372 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8373 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8374 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8375 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8376 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8377 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8378 @end table
8379
8380 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8381 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8382 @include fdl.texi
8383
8384 @node LD Index
8385 @unnumbered LD Index
8386
8387 @printindex cp
8388
8389 @tex
8390 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8391 % meantime:
8392 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8393 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8394 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8395 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8396 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8397 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8398 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8399 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8400 \page\colophon
8401 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8402 @end tex
8403
8404 @bye